MEDICAL CHEMISTRY Module 1 - ZSMUdspace.zsmu.edu.ua/bitstream/123456789/2066/1/ACID_basequil.pdf ·...

82
MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE Zaporizhzhya State Medical University Analytical Chemistry Department MEDICAL CHEMISTRY Module 1 ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS (Abstract) Topic module 2 Manual for teachers and students of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty speciality"GeneralMedicine" Zaporizhzhia 2013

Transcript of MEDICAL CHEMISTRY Module 1 - ZSMUdspace.zsmu.edu.ua/bitstream/123456789/2066/1/ACID_basequil.pdf ·...

MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE Zaporizhzhya State Medical University

Analytical Chemistry Department

MEDICAL CHEMISTRY

Module 1

ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

(Abstract)

Topic module 2

Manual

for teachers and students

of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty

specialityGeneralMedicine

Zaporizhzhia 2013

2

The Manual is composed by Doctor of pharmaceutical sciences professor S A Vasyuk Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences A S Korzhova Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences Y V Monaykina Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences B AVarynskyi Reviewed by Doctor of Pharmaceutical Sciences professor head of the Department of Organic and Bioorganic Chemistry S I Kovalenko Doctor of Pharmaceutical Sciences professor head of the Department of Inorganic Chemistry and Toxicology I Panasenko

Module 1 Medical chemistry Topic module 2 ACID-base equilibria in biological fluids (abstract) manual for teachers and students of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty speciality General Medicine comp S A Vasyuk [et al] ndash Zaporizhzhia [ZSMU] 2013 ndash 82 p

The Manual is considered and approved at the meeting of The Central Methodical Council of Zaporizhzhia State MedicalUniversity

(record 3 of 22022013)

3

PREFACE

Medicalchemistryisstudiedaccordingtotheapprovedstandardofacademiccurricu

lumof 2005 yearfor students of the Universities of the III-IV levels of

accreditationof Ukraine forspecialty 7110101 Generalmedicine fieldofstudy

1101 Medicine

isestablishedinaccordancewiththeeducationalandskillcharacteristics (ESC)

andeducationandprofessionalprograms (EPP)

trainingapprovedbyorderoftheMinistryofEducationofUkrainefrom 160403 239

Organization of studying process is proceed according to the requirements

ofEuropeanCreditTransferSystem (ECTS)

StudyofMedicalChemistryiscarriedoutduring 1 semesterof 1st yearoftraining

according to theacademic curriculum

Thecurriculumconsistsof a disciplinemodule including 4

blocksoftopicmodules

1 Chemistryofbiogenicelements Complexformationinbiologicalfluids

2 Acid ndash baseequilibriumsinbiologicalfluids

3Thermodynamic

andkineticprocessesregularitiesandelectrokineticphenomenainbiologicalsystems

4 Physicsandchemistryofsurfaceeffects

Lyophobicandlyophilicdispersesystems

4

TOPIC MODULE 2

ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

5

Tutorial 4

1 THEMECharacteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions

Solution preparation

2 PURPOSETo consolidate knowledge on solution concentration

expressing

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To get skills of calculation of substance sample weight solutions

concentration conversion of solutions concentrations from one to another

32 Learning to use glassware for solutions preparation

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

2

The Manual is composed by Doctor of pharmaceutical sciences professor S A Vasyuk Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences A S Korzhova Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences Y V Monaykina Candidate of Pharmaceutical Sciences B AVarynskyi Reviewed by Doctor of Pharmaceutical Sciences professor head of the Department of Organic and Bioorganic Chemistry S I Kovalenko Doctor of Pharmaceutical Sciences professor head of the Department of Inorganic Chemistry and Toxicology I Panasenko

Module 1 Medical chemistry Topic module 2 ACID-base equilibria in biological fluids (abstract) manual for teachers and students of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty speciality General Medicine comp S A Vasyuk [et al] ndash Zaporizhzhia [ZSMU] 2013 ndash 82 p

The Manual is considered and approved at the meeting of The Central Methodical Council of Zaporizhzhia State MedicalUniversity

(record 3 of 22022013)

3

PREFACE

Medicalchemistryisstudiedaccordingtotheapprovedstandardofacademiccurricu

lumof 2005 yearfor students of the Universities of the III-IV levels of

accreditationof Ukraine forspecialty 7110101 Generalmedicine fieldofstudy

1101 Medicine

isestablishedinaccordancewiththeeducationalandskillcharacteristics (ESC)

andeducationandprofessionalprograms (EPP)

trainingapprovedbyorderoftheMinistryofEducationofUkrainefrom 160403 239

Organization of studying process is proceed according to the requirements

ofEuropeanCreditTransferSystem (ECTS)

StudyofMedicalChemistryiscarriedoutduring 1 semesterof 1st yearoftraining

according to theacademic curriculum

Thecurriculumconsistsof a disciplinemodule including 4

blocksoftopicmodules

1 Chemistryofbiogenicelements Complexformationinbiologicalfluids

2 Acid ndash baseequilibriumsinbiologicalfluids

3Thermodynamic

andkineticprocessesregularitiesandelectrokineticphenomenainbiologicalsystems

4 Physicsandchemistryofsurfaceeffects

Lyophobicandlyophilicdispersesystems

4

TOPIC MODULE 2

ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

5

Tutorial 4

1 THEMECharacteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions

Solution preparation

2 PURPOSETo consolidate knowledge on solution concentration

expressing

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To get skills of calculation of substance sample weight solutions

concentration conversion of solutions concentrations from one to another

32 Learning to use glassware for solutions preparation

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

3

PREFACE

Medicalchemistryisstudiedaccordingtotheapprovedstandardofacademiccurricu

lumof 2005 yearfor students of the Universities of the III-IV levels of

accreditationof Ukraine forspecialty 7110101 Generalmedicine fieldofstudy

1101 Medicine

isestablishedinaccordancewiththeeducationalandskillcharacteristics (ESC)

andeducationandprofessionalprograms (EPP)

trainingapprovedbyorderoftheMinistryofEducationofUkrainefrom 160403 239

Organization of studying process is proceed according to the requirements

ofEuropeanCreditTransferSystem (ECTS)

StudyofMedicalChemistryiscarriedoutduring 1 semesterof 1st yearoftraining

according to theacademic curriculum

Thecurriculumconsistsof a disciplinemodule including 4

blocksoftopicmodules

1 Chemistryofbiogenicelements Complexformationinbiologicalfluids

2 Acid ndash baseequilibriumsinbiologicalfluids

3Thermodynamic

andkineticprocessesregularitiesandelectrokineticphenomenainbiologicalsystems

4 Physicsandchemistryofsurfaceeffects

Lyophobicandlyophilicdispersesystems

4

TOPIC MODULE 2

ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

5

Tutorial 4

1 THEMECharacteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions

Solution preparation

2 PURPOSETo consolidate knowledge on solution concentration

expressing

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To get skills of calculation of substance sample weight solutions

concentration conversion of solutions concentrations from one to another

32 Learning to use glassware for solutions preparation

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

4

TOPIC MODULE 2

ACID-BASE EQUILIBRIA IN BIOLOGICAL FLUIDS

5

Tutorial 4

1 THEMECharacteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions

Solution preparation

2 PURPOSETo consolidate knowledge on solution concentration

expressing

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To get skills of calculation of substance sample weight solutions

concentration conversion of solutions concentrations from one to another

32 Learning to use glassware for solutions preparation

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

5

Tutorial 4

1 THEMECharacteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions

Solution preparation

2 PURPOSETo consolidate knowledge on solution concentration

expressing

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To get skills of calculation of substance sample weight solutions

concentration conversion of solutions concentrations from one to another

32 Learning to use glassware for solutions preparation

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

6

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF- STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Solutions concentration and ways of its expression the mass fraction

molar concentration molar concentration of equivalent mole fraction molal

concentration (molality) the titre of the solute

2 The concept of equivalent equivalence factor molar mass of

equivalent

3 Chemical glassware for solution preparation volumetric flasks

pipettes burettes flasks cylinders beakers etc

4 The role of fluids in vital activity

52Solve the tasks

Task 1Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride if 20 g of sodium

chloride is dissolved in 180 g of water

Answer10

Task 2 500 ml of the solution contains 106 g of sodium carbonate Calculate

the molar concentration of the prepared solution

Answer 02 moll

Task 3 Sodium hydroxybutyrate is used for the introduction of anesthesia

It is available as 20 solution in 10 ml ampoules The dose of the drug is 70 mg

per 1 kg of body weight How many ml of sodium hydroxybutyrate must be

injected to the patient of 60 kg weighs

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

7

Answer 21 ml

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution if in

200 g of water was dissolved 50 g of sodium chloride

Solution We determine the mass of the solution

m = а(NaCl) + а(H2O) = 200 + 50 = 250 g

and find the mass fraction of sodium chloride in the solution

2010025050100

mаω х =sdot=sdot=

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the molar concentration of 20 solution of FeSO4 if its

densityis 121 g ml

Solution First we calculate how many grams of FeSO4 are contained in 1

liter of the solution

100ρV

а100

ω )(FeSO)(FeSO)(FeSO

44

4sdot

sdot=sdot= so

242100

211100002100

ρVωа )(FeSO

)(FeSO4

4=

sdotsdot=

sdotsdot= g

Recalculate the mass found in moles of FeSO4

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

8

5919151

242Mа

n)(FeSO

)(FeSO)(FeSO

4

4

4=== mol

As this number of moles is contained in 1 liter of the solution the molar

concentration of the solution is 159 moll

Answer 159 moll

Task 3 200 ml of solution contains 49 g of sulfuric acid Calculate the molar

concentration of sulfuric acid equivalent

SolutionWe calculate theequivalent molar massof sulfuric acid

М(H2SO4) = 98 gmol

fe(H2SO4) = 12

Мe(H2SO4) = М(H2SO4) middot fe(H2SO4) = 98 middot 12 = 48 gmol

Then we can find the equivalent molar concentration of sulfuric acid

050249

49 VM

)SOe(H

)SO(H)SOМe(H

42

42

42=

sdot=

sdot= moll

Answer 05 moll

54 Study tests

1 The mass fraction of a substance in solution is

А The ratio of the mass of the substance to the mass of the solution

В The ratio of the solution mass to the mass of the substance

С The difference between the mass of the solution and the mass of the

substance

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

9

2 What mass of NaCl is required for preparing of 2000 g of 5 solution

А 10g

В 100 g

С 150 g

D 5 g

Е 200 g

3 NaCl (sodium chloride) as isotonic (09) solution is used intravenously

subcutaneously rectally at poisoning toxic dyspepsia acute blood loss

shock How much water and sodium chloride (in grams) should be taken to

prepare 200 g of isotonic solution

А 18 g of water and 192g of sodium chloride

В 1982 g of water and 18 g of sodium chloride

С 153g of water и 57 g of sodium chloride

D 1928 g of water и 72 g of sodium chloride

Е 991 g of water и 09 g of sodium chloride

4 Molar mass of equivalent of acid М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

5 Molar mass of equivalent of base М is equal to МZ where Z is

А The acidity of the base

В Basicity of the acid

С The number of metal cations

D Valence of the metal

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

10

Е The number of acid residues

6 The molar mass of equivalent of salt М is МZ where Z is

А The number of metal cations

В Product of the number of metal cations and the valence of the metal

С Valence of the acid residue

D Valence of the metal

Е The number of acid residues

7 Equivalent molar mass of chromium sulfate (III) (М = 392 gmol) is

А 392 bull 6 = 2352

В 392 6 = 65

С 392 bull 2= 784

D 392 3 = 130

Е 392

8 Select the formula to calculate the mass fraction

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Vхa

9 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration

А VхM

хasdot

В 100mхаsdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

11

D Vхa

10 Select the formula to calculate the molar concentration of equivalent

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

11 Select a formula to calculate the titre

А VM

a

х

х

sdot

В 100mа х sdot

С VM

a

ekvх

x

sdot

D Va х

12 What is molar concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

13 What is molar concentration of equivalent

А The ratio of equivalents of a solute to volume of the solution

В The ratio of equivalents of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to the volume of the solution

14 What is molal concentration

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solvent

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

12

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the mass of the solution

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

15 What is mole fraction

А The ratio of the amount of a solute to the total amount of the components

of the solution

В The ratio of the amount of a solute to the amount of the solvent

С The ratio of the amount of a solute to solvent mass

16 What is the titre of the solution

А Mass of a solute in 1 ml of the solution

В Amount of the dissolved substance in 1 ml of the solution

С Mass of a solute in 100 ml of the solution

17 What is molar mass of equivalent

А The product of the equivalence factor and molar mass of the substance

В The product of the equivalence factor and weight of the substance

С The ratio of the molar mass of the substance to the factor of equivalence

18 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + 8H+ + 5ē harr Mn2+ + 4H2O

А 15

В 5

С 8

19 Indicate the equivalence factor of permanganate ion in half reaction

MnO4- + ē harr MnО4

2-

А 15

В 5

С 8

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

13

D 13

Е 1

20 Indicate the equivalence factor of sulfuric acid in the reaction

2NaOH + H2SO4 harr Na2SO4 + 2H2O

А 12

В 2

С 1

D 13

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Preparation of solutions of a given concentration

Calculate the weight of the samples and prepare solutions of NaCl and

Na2CO3 200 ml of 01 M 250 ml of 02 N 100 ml of 3

Weigh the calculated sample of the substance on the balance put it into a

volumetric flask (for 01 M and 02 N solutions) or into a cylinder (3 solutions)

dissolve in a small amount of distilled water and bring to the volume with the same

solvent stir thoroughly and transfer the solution into a bottle for storage

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards for determination of initial level of knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

15

Tutorial 5

1 THEMEAcid-baseequilibriumin a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH)

of biological fluids

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess and predict the processes the flow of

which depends on the change of the reaction medium

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To use knowledge of the concentration of hydrogen ions to assess the

properties of solutions direction of chemical reactions

32 To gain the skills of calculation of strong and weak electrolytes solutions

pH

33 To gain the skills of determination of solutions pH by means of

indicators

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

16

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self-study

1 Electrolyte solutions The dissociation of strong and weak electrolytes

2 Dissociation of water The ionic product of water

3 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

4 Calculation of the pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

5 Biological pH

6 Determination of pH using indicators Methyl orange

phenolphthalein

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree of hydrolysis hydrolysis constant The

role of hydrolysis in the biochemical processes

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 01 M solutions of hydrochloric acid and sodium

hydroxide To show how it changes when the solutions are diluted 100 times

Answer1 13 3 11

Task 2 Calculate the pH of 1 M solution of phenol

Answer 5

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

17

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of HCOOK when K(HCOOН)= 1810-4

Answer 5510-11 74510-3

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of 001 M solution of HCOOK

Solution Formate ion is an anion base so we use the formula to calculate the

pH of weak bases

pН = 7 + frac12рКа + frac12lgCb

Reference data рКа(НСООН) = 375

pН = 7 + frac12 middot375 + frac12 lg001 = 7 + 188 + frac12 middot (ndash2) = 788

Answer 788

Task 2 Calculate the pH of a 001 M aqueous solution of ammonium acetate

Solution Ammonium acetate is a salt formed by a weak base and a weak

acid Therefore we use the formula

pН = frac12 (рКw + рКаndashрКb)

Reference data

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476 рКb(NН4ОН) = 476

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

18

pН = frac12 (14 + 476 ndash 476) = 7

Answer 7

Task 3 Calculate the constant and the degree of hydrolysis of 001 M

solution of sodium arsenite NaAsO2 when K(HAsO2) = 5810ndash10

SolutionNaAsO2 is a salt formed by a strong baseanda weak acid so

510

14

a

wh 10172

105810

KK

К minusminus

minus

sdot=sdot

== 2

10

14

a

wh 10154

010108510

KK minus

minus

minus

sdot=sdotsdot

=sdot

=bC

α

or αh = 415

Answer 172middot10-5 415

54 Study tests

1 Indicatethe most correctdefinition of electrolytes These are substances

A Current conductors

BDecomposed byan electric current

CSolutions and meltswhichconduct electricity

2 Dissociation - is

A Decomposition of salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

B Decomposition of electrolyte by an electric current

C Decomposition of electrolyte into ions under the influence of a polar

solvent

D Destruction of red blood cell as a result of osmosis in hypotonic solution

3In solution weak electrolyte exists mostly in the form of

A Ions

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

19

B Molecules

C Equal number of ions and molecules

4 Strong acids include

А H2S

В H2SO3

С H2SO4

D HNO2

Е HNO3

5 The dissociation constant characterizes the dissociation of

A a strong electrolyte

B a weak electrolyte

C a nonelectrolyte

6 Which of the following substances in aqueous solution dissociates

reversible

А ВеС12

В HNO3

С H2CO3

D MgCl2

7 What particles concentration is most important in aqueous solution of

Н3РО4 (α = 17)

А Н+

В Н3РО4

С РО43-

D Н2РО4-

Е НРО42-

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

20

8 Using the values of the dissociation constants Ka indicate which acid is the

strongest

А HNO2 (Ка=5middot10-4)

В НВгО(Ка=2middot10-9)

С СН3СООН(Ка=2middot10-5)

D НСООН (Ка=2middot10-4)

Е С6Н5СООН (Ка=6middot10-5)

9Whichaqueous solutionis a process ofdissociation in

А NH3

В CO2

С Cl2

D SO2

Е N2

10 What substances will decrease the degree of dissociation of acetic acid

СН3СООН

А НCl

В Н2О

С CH3COONa

D CH3COOК

11 What is the pH of a solution with concentration of H+ equal to 910 mol

l

А 5

В 7

С 9

D 11

Е 14

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

21

12 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pH of 10

А 10-6

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

13 What is the concentration of hydrogen ions in a solution with pOH of 10

А 10-5

В 10-4

С 10-10

D 10-1

Е 1

14 pH of the first solution is 6 of the second - 3 How many times the

concentration of hydrogen ions in the first solution is less than the second

А 2 -fold

В 10-fold

С 100 -fold

Д 1000 -fold

Е 10000 -fold

15 The ionic product of water is

А 10-7

В 10-14

С 10-10

D 7

Е 14

16Selectthe concentrationof OH-ions that corresponds to an acid solution

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

22

А 10-7

В 10-9

С 10-4

D 10-3

Е 10-6

17 The process of salt destruction under the action of water with forming of

a weak electrolyte is called

A Hemolysis

B Hydrolysis

C Electrolysis

D Dissociation

E Plasmolysis

18Salts are nothydrolyzedif they are formed by

A a strong base anda weak acid

Ba weakbase anda weak acid

Ca strong base anda weak acid

Da strong base anda strong acid

19 Hydrolysis is

A Decomposition of electrolyte into ions

B Destruction of erythrocyte in hypotonic solution

C Decomposition of electrolyte by electric current

D Decomposition of a salt by water with the formation of a weak electrolyte

20 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of AlCl3 mainly

А Аl(ОН)3

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

23

В Аl(ОН)2Cl

С АlОНCl2

21 What salt is formed after hydrolysis of Na3BO3 mainly

А H3BO3

В NaH2BO3

С Na2HBO3

22Hydrolysis ofFeCl3ismainly

A Inone stage withthe formation of FeOHCl2

BIn twostageswith the formation of Fe(OH)2Cl

C Inthree stageswith the formation Fe(OH)3

23 pH of Νа2СО3 solution is

A Neutral

B Acidic

C Alkaline

24рН of CH3COONH4 aqueous solution is

А рНlt 7

В рНgt 7

С рН asymp 7

25 What salt has рНlt 7

А ZnCl2

В Na2S

С CHCOONH4

D CaCl2

26What salt aqueous solution has рН = 7

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

24

А Na2CO3

В Na2S

С Na2SO4

D NaHCO3

Е CuSO4

27 Indicate which of these salts is hydrolyzed to the greatest extent

А FeCl2

В NaCl

С Na2SO3

D CaCl2

Е FeSO3

28 What factors increase the hydrolysis of salts

A Increased pressure

B Increasing of the salt concentration

C Dilution

D Cooling

29 What substance increases AlCl3 hydrolysis when adding it any to the

solution

А HCl

В H2O

С АlСl3

D NaOH

30 In which of these solutions is hydrolysis reduced by adding NaOH

А NaCl

В (NH4)2SO4

С Na2CO3

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

25

D NaNO3

31 In which case will the color of phenolphthalein in a solution of sodium

acetate CH3COONa be more intense

A When the solution is heated

B Upon cooling of the solution

C With vigorous stirring

32 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the cation

A Sodium sulfate

B Sodium sulfite

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

33 Which of the following salts is hydrolyzed by the anion

A Sodium sulfate

B Potassium Sulphate

C Ammonium sulphate

D Sodium sulphide

34 Choose only the acids

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

35 Choose only the bases

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

26

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

36 Choose ampholytes

А Н2РО4-

В РО43-

С Н3РО4

D NH3

Е NH4+

37 The ionic product of water is

A Sum of the concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

B The ratio of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

C The product of the concentration of hydrogen ions and hydroxide ions

38 At pH = 2 the ionic product of water is

А 10-2

В 10-4

С 10-14

D 10-10

Е 10-12

39 pH is

A The natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

B The negative natural logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

C The negative decimal logarithm of the hydrogen ion concentration

D The negative decimal logarithm of the acid concentration

E The natural logarithm of the acid concentration

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

27

40 pOH is

A The natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

B The negative natural logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

C The negative decimal logarithm of the concentration of hydroxyl ions

D The negative decimal logarithm of the base concentration

E The natural logarithm of the alkali concentration

41 Pepsin of gastric juice acts in

A the neutral media

B the alkaline media

C the acidic media

42 рН of 0001 М nitric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

43 рН of 00001 М hydrochloric acid solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

44 рН of 0001 М sodium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

28

45 рОН of 0001 М potassium hydroxide solution is

А 3

В 4

С 11

D 10

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 The study of methyl orange (MO) and phenolphthalein (FF)

indicators colouring in acidic and alkaline media

Put test solutions and proposed indicators in a series of test tubes according to

the table

Put down the results of the experiments into the table

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

29

Test tube Solution+indicator Colour

1 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsMO

2 1 mlNaОН + 2 dropsMO

3 1 ml НС1 + 2 dropsFF

4 1 ml NaОН + 2 dropsFF

62 Determination of solutions pH with universal indicator paper

Apply the test solution on a strip of universal indicator paper with a glass rod

Compare the colour of the paper with a standard colour scale of pH Put down the

results of the experiments into the table

Test Solution Colour рН

1 1 мл НС1

2 1 мл NaОН

63 Determination of solution pH with ionomer (pH meter)

The cell for pH determination is made of glass indicator electrode and silver

chloride reference electrode Universal ionomer ЭВ-74 must be set up according to

the instructions Electrodes must be thoroughly washed with distilled water before

dipping and wiped with filter paper pH is measured in separate portions of the

sample solution Carry out several parallel measurements Put down the results of

the experiments into the table

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

30

Solution рН

рН1 рН2 рНср

Stocksolution

СН3СООН

Dilution 12

Dilution 14

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

31

Tutorial 6

1 THEMEBuffer systems

2 PURPOSETo learn to assess the effect of the buffer systems to

maintain a certain pH

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills to prepare buffers with given pH

32 To use the knowledge about the mechanism of action of the buffer

systems for predicting biochemical processes in the body fluids when the reaction

medium changes

33 To learn to identify the boundaries of the buffer system with acids and

alkalis

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

32

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in them

2 Buffer capacity the factors on which it depends

3 Practical definition of buffer capacity by acid and alkali

4 Examples of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Show the

mechanism of action by the reaction equation

5 Calculation of the buffer system pH

6 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The

mechanism of action

7 The significance of the buffer systems to organisms

8 Acid-base status of the body Acidosis alkalosis (respiratory

metabolic)

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the pH of a buffer mixture containing 001 mole of formic

acid and 02 M of potassium formate

Answer505

Task 2 Calculate the required volumes of solutions of СН3СООNa (СМe=01

moll) andСН3СООН (СМe=01 moll) for preparing of 3 l of acetate buffer pH

524

Answer 2250 ml 750 ml

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

33

Task 3 The titration of 100 mL of serum (pH = 736) took 36 mL of 005 M

HCl Calculate the buffering capacity of the blood if the pH changed to 70

Answer0005 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 Calculate the concentration of H + OH- and pH of the solution

obtained by mixing 50 ml of 02 M acetic acid and 30 ml of 01 M sodium acetate

solution

Solution As the solution contains a weak acid and its conjugate base it is a

buffer system the pH of which can be calculated according to the formula

a

bа C

ClgрКрН +=

Reference dataрКа(СН3СООН) = 476

24430lg76450203010lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа =+=

sdotsdot

+=+=

5424pH 105791010]H[ minusminusminus+ sdot===

105

14w 10173

1057910

][HK][OH minus

minus

minus

+minus sdot=

sdot==

Answer 424 579middot10-5 173middot10-10

Task 2 Calculate the buffering capacity of acetate buffer containing 700 ml

of acetic acid(СМe=01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate(СМe=01 moll) The

titration of the buffer system with phenolphthalein took 200 ml NaOH (СМe=05

moll)

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

34

Solution Buffer capacity for alkali calculated as

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot=

рКа(СН3СООН) = 476

394370764710310lg764

CClgрКрН

a

bа0 =minus=

sdotsdot

+=+=

рН1 ndash corresponds to the lower boundary of the color change range of

phenolphthalein indicator (82)

moll 0260)394(82010

002005В (NaOH) =minussdot

sdot=

Answer 0026 moll

54 Study tests

1 Buffer systems is aqueous solutions which maintain a constant

A Osmotic pressure

B Temperature

C pH value

D Potential difference

2 The buffer system is

A a redox pair

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

35

B an acid-base pair

S a galvanic pair

3 Acidic buffer solutions consist of

A A strong acid and a weak base

B A weak acid and a strong base

C A weak acid and its conjugate base

D A strong acid and its conjugate base

4 Basic buffer solutions consist of

A A weak base and a strong acid

B A strong base and a weak acid

C A weak base and its conjugate acid

D A strong base and its conjugate acid

5What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of CO2 to

form a buffer system

А H2CO3

В NaHCO3

С NaOH

D Na2CO3

Е HCl

6What substance solution can be added to an aqueous solution of NH3 to

form a buffer system

А NH4Cl

В HNO3

С NaOH

D NaCl

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

36

Е HCl

7 What substance binds strong acid added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

8 What substance binds alkali added to the buffer solution

A Strong base

B Proton acceptor

C Strong acid

D Proton donor

9 Excess H + or OH-ions are bound components of the buffer solution

forming

A Strong electrolyte

B Ampholyte

C Weak electrolyte

D Nonelectrolyte

10 When adding HCl to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

37

11 When adding NaOH to a buffer solution pH does not changes because of

forming of

A A strong base

B A weak acid

C A strong acid

D A weak base

E Water

12 What is pH of acetate buffer with concentration ratio of components equal

to 1

A 100

V 476

C 700

D 925

E 11000

13 In phosphate buffer add acid is bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

14 Strong alkalis added to phosphate buffer are bound by

A НРО42- - ion

B Н2РО4-- ion

C Acid Н3РО4

D РО43-- ion

15 Buffer system of blood does not include

A Aacetate

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

38

B Protein

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

16 In physiological media CO2 forms

A Carbonate

B Hydrocarbons

S Carbonates and bicarbonates

17 What equilibrium are in the red blood cells after CO2 absorption

А СО2 + Н2О harr 2Н+ + СО32-

В СО2 + Н2О harr Н+ + НСО3-

С СО2 + Н2О harr Н2СО3 harr Н+ + НСО3-

18 Which of the proposed buffer systems of the body has a function of

conjugate base (proton acceptor)

А HHb

В H3N+ - COOH

С NaHCO3

D KH2PO4

Е HHbO2

19 In the tissue capillaries excess of acid (H + ions) is bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

39

20 Pulmonary capillary blood pH remains constant as excess of H + ions is

bound by

А HHb

В Hbndash

С HCO3-

D HHbO2

Е HbO2ndash

21 Select one that is proton donor (a weak acid) of the buffer systems of the

body

А NaHCО3

В НРО42-

С H3N+- Prot-COO-

D HbO2ndash

22 What is the weak acid in acidic protein buffer

А H2N-Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

23What is the base in basic protein buffer

А H2N- Prot-COO-

В H3N+- Prot-COO-

С H3N+- Prot-COOН

24In which of the buffer systems is acid buffer capacity the maximum

А 100 ml 01 М HNO2 + 50 ml 02 М KNO2

В 20 ml 01 М HNO2 + 10 ml 01 М KNO2

С 50 ml 02 М HNO2 + 20 ml 01 М KNO2

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

40

25 How will buffer solution pH change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

26 How will buffer capasity change after dilution

A Increase

B Decrease

C Do not change

27 Choose the two most powerful buffers of red blood cells

A Acetate

B Amino acid

S Bicarbonate

D Phosphate

E Hemoglobin

28 Acetate buffer contains

А СН3СООН+СН3СООС2Н5

В СН3СООН+NaOH

С СН3СООН+СН3СООNa

29 Components ratio of bicarbonate buffer of the blood plasma at pH = 736

should be

А 151

В 201

С 71

30 Phosphate buffer contains

А Н3РО4+ NaН2РО4

В NaН2РО4+Na2НРО4

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

41

С Na3РО4+ Na2НРО4

31 Acidosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

32 Alkalosis is the shift of blood pH to

A The acidic side

V The alkaline side

C To pH = 7

33 Blood рН is

А 736

В 186

С 602

D 556

34 Gastric pH is

А 71-83

В 31-44

С 09-15

D 80-105

35 Urine pH is

А 50-65

В 80-105

С 31-44

D 71-83

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

42

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

3 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

4 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Effect of acid and alkali on the pH of the buffer system

Put 5 ml CH3COOH (СМe = 01 moll) and 5 ml СН3СООNa (СМe = 01

moll) into the test tube Pour the resulting buffer system equally into three tubes

Add 3 drops of HC1

(СМe = 01 moll) into the first test tube Add 3 drops of NaOH (СМe = 01 moll)

into the second test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator into each tube

Compare the color of the solutions write down the reactions and draw conclusions

62 Effect of dilution on the buffer system pH

Prepare the buffer system (as 61) and pour equally into two test tubes Add 6

ml of distilled water to the first test tube Add 2 drops of methyl orange indicator to

each tube Compare the color of the solutions and draw conclusions

63 Determination of buffer capacity of acetate buffer system

1000 ml of acetate buffer system which contains 700 ml of acetic acid (СМe

= 01 moll) and 300 ml of sodium acetate (СМe = 01 moll) should be prepared in

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

43 a titration flask Add 2 drops of phenolphthalein to this solution and titrate with

alkali (СМe = 01 moll) until pink colou appearsr Calculate the buffer capacity by

alkali

)рН(pHVVС

В01buffsol

(NaOH)(NaOH) Мe(NaOH) minussdot

sdot= where

В ndash buffer capacity of the solution by alkali

СМэ(NaОН) ndash equivalent molar concentration of alkali

V(NaОН) ndash volume of alkali

Vbuffsol ndash volume of the buffer system

рН0 ndash initial pH value of the buffer solution

рН1 ndash final pH value of buffer solution

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

44

Tutorial 7

1 THEMEFundamentals oftitrimetricanalysisAcid-base titration

2 PURPOSETo learn the basics of quantitative analysis to study the

general principles of titrimetric methods and techniques of acid-base titration

3 OBJECTIVE GOALS

31 To understand the objectives principles and methods of quantitative

analysis

32 To learn the basics of titrimetric methods of analysis learn how to use the

analytical measuring glassware

33 To gain skills of alkalimetric titration

34 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

45

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

51 Questions for self- study

1 The essence of the quantitative analysis

2 The essence of titrimetric methods of analysis Basic concepts

Classification of titrimetric methods on the type of chemical reaction

3 Volume measurement Measuring glassware

4 Standard solutions (titrants) and methods of their preparing Primary

and secondary standards Ways of expressing of standard solutions concentration

5 What reactions underlie the acid-base titration What is the essence of

acidimetry and alkalimetry

6 Titration curves drastic change equivalence point

7 Acid-base indicators Transition interval of indicator the principle of

indicator selecting for titration

8 Application of alkalimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and

hygienic studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the equivalent molar concentration of sodium hydroxide if

the titration of 2000 ml of 005075 M solution of oxalic acid consumed 1950 ml

of this solution

Answer01041 moll

Task 2 Calculate the sample of sodium tetraborate decahydrate

(MNa2B4O7middot10H2O =

3814 гмоль) to prepare 2000 ml of 005000 N solution

Answer 1907 g

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

46

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 1 The titration of 2000 ml of 009218 N solution of sodium tetraborate

consumed

1942 ml of solution of hydrochloric acid Calculate the equivalent molar

concentration and the titre of HCl solution

Solution According to the law of equivalents

СМe(Na2B4O7) middotV(Na2B4O7) = СМe(HCl)middotV(HCl)

then

0949304219

0020092180V

VСC

(HCl)

)OB(Na)OB(NaМ(HCl)M

742742Э

Э=

sdot=

sdot= мольл

Calculate the titre of HCl solution according to the formula

Т = СМe(HCl) middot Мeprime(HCl)

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl) = 1

Мeprime(HCl) = М(HCl) middot fe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

Т = 009493 middot 003646 = 0003461

Answer0003461 gml 009493 moll

54 Study tests

1 Is a solution prepared by sample accurately weighed a solution with a

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

47

known titer

A It is possible because it is used for titration

B No it is not

C It can be because the title of the solution is easy to calculate

2 Titrant (standard solution working solution) is called reagent solutions

A Of known concentration C and used in the titration

BOf determined concentration

C Of known titre

D Of known concentration

E Used in the titration of the analyte

3 Specify how to prepare standard solution

A Prepared and determined titre

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Pipetting and separate samples

E Indication and instrumental

4 Specify the primary way of titrants concentration expressing

A Equivalent molar concentration

B Titre

C The titer for the analyte

D Percentage concentration

E Molar concentration

5 The reactions used in titrimetric analysis methods must meet the

requirements

A proceeding to the stoichiometric ratios

B being fast enough

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

48

C It must be possible to fix the point of equivalence

D Should not go to adverse reactions

E The reaction should proceed quantitatively

6 Which of the following laws is the theoretical basis of titrimetric methods

of analysis

A The law of equivalents

B The law of conservation of mass substances

C The law of multiple proportions

D The volume ratio law

7 The end point in the method of acid-base titration is determined by the pH

indicator What should be taken into account in the selection of pH indicators

A The pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The change in pH during the titration

E The nature of the analyte

8 Primary standards must meet the requirements of

A To be chemically pure and meet the chemical formula

B To be stable when stored in solid form and in solution

C Have a large equivalent molar mass

D To be easily purified by recrystallization or otherwise

E All of the above

9 In the method of acid-base titration volumetric solution (titrant) is prepared

ABy the method of prepared titre

B By the method of determined titre

C From the standard titres

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

49

D By the method of pipetting

E By the method of separate portions

10 The equipment that is necessary to perform the titration method

A Volumetric glassware for accurate volume measuring

B Volumetric glassware for rough volume measuring

C Indicators for fixing the equivalence point

D Titrants

E All the above

11 What methods of acid-base titration allow to determine the contents in of

sulfuric acid solution

A alkalimetry

B acidimetry

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

12 Titration curve is

A Graphic representation of the pH changes in the titration

B The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

13 Titration drastic change - is

A Sudden change in pH near the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

50

14 The start of the drastic change is

A 01 before the equivalence point

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

E 01 after the equivalence point

15 The start of the drastic change is

А 01 after the equivalence point

В Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

С 01 before the equivalence point

D Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

Е The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

16 The equivavalence point is

A Strictly equivalent amount of titrant is added

B Graphic representation of pH changes in the titration

C 01 before the equivalence point

D The sharp change in pH near the equivalence point

E 01 after the equivalence point

17 Find the definition of indicator transition interval

A The pH at which there is a visible change in color of the indicator

B The value of the pH at which titration with the indicator is completed

C The amount of titrant is strictly equivalent to the amount of analyte

D Time of the titration when the pH is 7

E Endpoint of the titration

18 For the titration curve construction should be calculated pH at different

titration points

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

51

A Of the stock solution

B At a half-neutralization point

C At the start of the drastic change

D At the equivalence point

E At the end of the drastic change

19 In the selection of pH-indicators value the most significant is

A pH at the equivalence point

B Nature of the titrant

C The properties of the reaction products

D The nature of the analyte

E Change in pH during the titration

20 What requirements should the reactions in titrimetric analysis meet

A Adequate reaction rate

B Stoichiometric ratio of the components

C Ability to fix the point of equivalence

D Reaction products must be soluble

E The reaction products should be colorless

21 Specify how pH indicators are selected

A Qualitative and quantitative

B Pipetting and separate samples

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

22 What indicators are used in cases when titrating NH3 with HCl solution

A Phenolphthalein

B Methyl orange

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

52

C Either one or the other

D Neither one nor the other

23 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically with sufficient speed

А Direct titration

В Back titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

24Choose the right l procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant

stoichiometrically but slowly

А Back titration

В Direct titration

С Substitution titration

D Separate samples technique

25 Choose the right procedure if the substance reacts with the titrant quickly

but not stoichiometrically

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

26 Choose the right procedure if the substance does not directly interact with

the titrant

А Substitution titration

В Direct titration

С Back titration

D Separate samples technique

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

53

27 Specify titration methods

A Direct and indirect

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Pipetting and separate portions

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

28 Specify titration techniques

A Pipetting and separate portions

B Qualitative and quantitative

C Direct and indirect

D Prepared and determined titre

E Indication and instrumental

29 What law are calculations in volumetric analysis based on

A Law of equivalents

B Law of mass conservation

C Law of constant composition

D Avogadros law

E Raultrsquos Law

30 What is necessary for the preparation of burette for titration

A Rinse it with a titrant

B Rinse it with analyzed solution

C Rinse it with distilled water

31 The substances used to prepare titrants must

A Be solid

B Not change the composition during the storage in the solid state and in

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

54

solution

C Be colorless

D Not have odor

32 What belongs to volumetric glassware for accurate measuring

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric tube

33 HCl with exactly known concentration can be prepared in a volumetric

flask only by

A taking the accurate sample of HCl at analytical balance

B taking the accurate amount of HCl with a pipette

C from fixanal

34 The volume of a sample solution for titration is metered by

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Pipette

D Volumetric tube

35 Before each titration it is necessary to

A Bring the titrant volume to zero

B Record the division of the burette from which the titration starts

C Bring the titrant volume to the nearest whole number

36 The solutions of exact concentration are prepared in the

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

55

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

37 How the last drop can be removed from a pipette

A Touch the end of the pipette to the wall of the flask

B Blown last drop

C Shake the pipette

38 Titration process is carried out using

A Burette

B Graduated cylinder

C Beaker

D Volumetric flask

39 What condition is incorrect Reactions underlying titrimetric analysis

should be

A Fast

B Not be accompanied by side effects

C Exothermic

D Irreversible

40 When transferring the sample pipette should be held

A Vertically

B Horizontally

C Turning up the spout

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

56

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of hydrochloric acid mass fraction

Method ndash direct titration

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

HCl + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+ + OH- harr Н2O

Preliminary calculations

М(HCl) = 3646 gmol

fe(HCl)= 1

Мe(HCl)= fe(HCl) middotМ(HCl)=1 middot 3646 = 3646 gmol

Мeprime(HCl)= Мe(HCl) 1000 = 003646

General procedure put 500 ml of pharmacopoeia hydrochloric acid (ρ=104

gsm3) into 1000 ml volumetric flask bring to the mark with distilled water and

mix Then transfer 500 ml of the resulting solution with measuring pipette into

titration flask add 1-2 drops of phenolphthalein indicator and titrate from the

burette with 01 M solution of sodium hydroxide until a stable (not disappearing

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

57 within 30 sec) pale pink color of the solution achived Repeat the titration until

three reproducible results achived

Mass fraction (in ) of hydrochloric acid in the preparation is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000Vа100VMCV

ωp(HCl)

fe(HCl)(NaOH)M(NaOH)(HCl) sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

58

Tutorial 8

1 THEMEAcid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

2 PURPOSETo understand the essence of acidimetry and learn how to

use this method in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic studies

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of acidimetric titration

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

59

51 Questions for self- study

1 Acid-base titration the basic equation of the method

2 Acidimetry Titrants and methods of their preparing Primary and

secondary standards

3 Titration curves

4 Acid-base indicators

5 Application of acidimetry in clinical analysis in sanitary and hygienic

studies

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate sample of sodium carbonate (fe = 12) to prepare 4000 ml

of 005000 N solution

Answer106 g

Task 2 The sample of1083 g of sodium carbonate is dissolved in a

volumetric 2000 ml flask Calculate the molar concentration and the titre of the

resulting solution

Answer 0005415 gml 005110 moll

53 Examples of the solved tasks

Task 12500ml of detergentplaced in 2500mlflaskandbrought with water to

the mark The titration of 500 ml of this solution took 400 ml of 0025 M solution

of hydrochloric acid Calculate the ammonia content in gl assuming that the

alkalinity of the sample is determined only by the component

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

60

Solution Calculate how many grams of ammonia are contained in 10000 ml

аV100001000VМCV

mp

f)(NH e(HCl)(HСHС 3

sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

gl 40300520051000

0100005020371025000004m =sdotsdot

sdotsdotsdotsdot=

Answer 340 gl

54 Study tests (p 149-155)

Literature

1 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

2 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of mass content of ammonia

in aqueous ammonia solution

Method ndash Back titration (titration by excess)

Pipetting technique

Chemical reaction

NH3middotH2O + HCl harr NH4Cl + H2O

NH3middotH2O + H+ harr NH4 + H2O

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

61

HCl(res) + NaOH harr NaCl + H2O

H+(res)+ OH- harr H2O

Preliminary calculations

М(NH3)= 1703 gmol

fe(NH3)= 1

Мe(NH3)= fe(NH3) middotМ(NH3) = 1703 gmol

General procedure put the sample into the 5000 ml volumetric flask

quantitatively bring with distilled water to the mark and mix thoroughly Transfer

1000 ml of the resulting solution into a titration flask in which 2000 ml 01000 M

solution of hydrochloric acid should be put beforehand Add 1-2 drops of methyl

orange indicator and titrated with 01000 M sodium hydroxide to change the colour

of the solution from pink to orangeRepeat the titration until three reproducible

results achieved

The gram amountof ammonia in aqueous ammonia solution is calculated by

the average amount of sodium hydroxide according to the formula

1000VVM)VCV(C

mp

f)e(NH(NaOH)(NaOH)M(HCI))HCI(M)(NH

3

3 sdot

sdotsdotsdotminussdot=

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

62

Tutorial 9

1 THEMEColligative properties of solutions

2 PURPOSETo learn how to use data on the osmotic pressure in

medical practice

3 OBJECTIVES

31 To gain the skills of calculation of osmotic pressure osmotic

concentration isotonic coefficient

32 To learn how to interpret the results of the analysis in clinical practice

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational part helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of the theme studying (opening address of

the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 Determination of initial knowledge level helliphelliphelliphellip15 min

44 Correction of the initial knowledge levelhelliphelliphellip25 min

45 Organization of independent work of students (target teacher guidance

rules of accident prevention) helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

46 Laboratory work helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip45 min

47 Final comtrol cheking of the laboratory work results and protocols

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

48 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next lesson

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3 min

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF-STUDY

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

63

51 Questions for self- study

1 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its

corollariesCryometry (depression) ebulliometry

2 Diffusion and osmosis in solutions

3 Vant Hoffs Law of osmotic pressureIsotonic coefficient

4 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

Oncotic pressure turgor hemolysis plasmolysis

52Solve the tasks

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the non-electrolyte if the osmotic

pressure of 100 ml of solution in which 75 g of this substance dissolved is equal

to 2128 kPa at 25 deg C

Answer8732 gmol

Task 2 Human albumin has a molar mass of 65 kgmol Calculate the

osmotic pressure of the solution of 2 g of protein per 100 ml of water at 27 deg C

Count the solution density is 10 gml

Answer 767 Pa

Task 3 What is boiling temperature of the solution containing 235 g of non-

electrolyte with molar mass of 94 gmol in 2500 g of water

Answer 10052degС

53 Examples of the solved tasks

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

64

Task 1 Calculate the molar mass of the solute if the vapor pressure above

the solution containing 5 g of the substance in 720 g of water at 298 K is equal to

3145 kPa and the vapor pressure of water at the same temperature is equal to

3167 kPa

Solution The lowering of the vapor pressure above the solution is

∆p = p0 ndash p = 3167 ndash 3145 = 0022 кПа

The molar mass of the solvent (water) is equal to 18 gmol We calculate the

molar mass of the solute according to the formula

gmol 1807202201851673

mΔpMmp

МO)(H

O)(H(sub)0(sub)

2

2 =sdotsdotsdot

=sdot

sdotsdot=

Answer 180 gmol

Task 2 The solution of 20 g of hemoglobin in 1 liter of water has an osmotic

pressure of 0762 kPa at 298 K Calculate the molar mass of hemoglobin

Solution Molar mass of hemoglobin can be calculated from Vant Hoffs Law

of osmotic pressure

gmol 6502876201

298314820πV

TRmМ =sdot

sdotsdot=

sdotsdotsdot

=

Answer 65028 gmol

Task 3 Calculate the osmotic pressure of 585 sodium chloride solution at

273 K The dissociation degree of sodium chloride is 096 and the density of the

solution is 104 gml

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

65

Solution The osmotic pressure of the electrolyte solution is calculated by the

formula

TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

Previously we calculate the molar concentration of sodium chloride solution

and the isotonic coefficient

moll 1585

10104585М

10ρωСМ =sdotsdot

=sdotsdot

=

i = 1 + α (n ndash 1) = 1 + 096 (2 ndash 1) = 196

The osmotic pressure is

kPa 44527383141196π =sdotsdotsdot=

Answer 445 kPa

54 Study tests

1 Colligative properties of the solutions depend on

A The number of particles in solution

B The chemical nature of the solute

C The chemical nature of the solvent

2 Osmosis is a spontaneous process of diffusion of

A Solvent towards a concentrated solution

B Solvent towards a diluted solution

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

66

C Dissolved substances towards concentrated solution

D Solute towards a diluted solution

3Isotonic solutions have the same

А рН

В Osmotic pressure

С Тb

D Тf

4 What do red blood cells placed in 9 NaCl solution undergo

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Do not change

5 What transition is through a semipermeable membrane during red blood

cells hemolysis

A of the solvent from the cell

B of the solvent into the cell

C of solute from the cell

D of the solute into the cell

6 What process occurs with erythrocytes in a hypotonic solution

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C No changes

7 Isotonic coefficient for electrolyte solutions is

А i = l

В i gt l

С i lt l

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

67

8 What osmotic pressure do solutions with the same molar concentration of

NaCl and glucose have

А The same

В πglucltπNaCl

С π glucgtgtπNaCl

9 There are solutions with the same molar concentration of 001 moll

glucose sodium chloride and calcium chloride Which solution will be of the

greatest osmotic pressure

А CaCl2

В Glucose

С NaCl

10 When canning foods in syrup microorganisms become unviable due to

A Hemolysis

B Plasmolysis

C Denaturation

11 Oncotic pressure is

A The osmotic pressure of the blood of cancer patients

B The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to the presence of low

molecular weight electrolytes in it

C The part of the blood osmotic pressure due to plasma proteins

D Integral part of the blood osmotic pressur caused by the relation

hemoglobin oxy-hemoglobin

12 Boiling point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

68

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

13Freezing point of solutions compared to the pure solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

D Depends on the nature of the solute

14 Solutions of glucose and sugar which have the same molar concentration

boil

A At the same temperature

В Тb (gluc)ltТb (sugar)

С Тb (gluc)gtТb (sugar)

15 The solubility of oxygen in the blood plasma will increase when

A Decreasing of the concentration of salts in the plasma

B Increasing of the salt concentration in the plasma

C Increasing of the pressure

D Rising of the temperature

16 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

maximum boiling point

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

17 Which of the following solutions with the same concentration has a

minimum boiling point

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

69

A Potassium chloride

B Urea

C Calcium chloride

D Sodium chloride

18 Will the osmotic pressure increasing the same with increasing of

temperature if diluted solutions of glucose andacetic acid have the same

concentration

A Yes it will

B Osmotic pressure of glucose ltacetic acid

C The osmotic pressure of glucosegt acetic acid

19 There are three solutions with the same concentration - 01 mol l -

sodium chloride (A) calcium chloride (B) and glucose (C) Which of the

solutions will be hypertonic in relation to each other

A A in relation to C

B A in relation to B

CB in relation to A and C

D C in relation to A and B

20 The semipermeable membrane passes molecules of

A Solvent

B Solution

C Dissolved substance

21 Choose a natural semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

70

22 Choose a synthetic semipermeable membrane

A Polyethylene

B The membrane of animal cells

C Paper

D Cellophane

23 Osmotic pressure is

A The excessive atmosphere pressure which stops osmosis

B The excessive hydrostatic pressure which stops osmosis

C Hydrostatic pressure which directs osmosis in reverse

24 Osmotic pressure is measured

A Stalagmometer

B Osmometer

C Viscometer

25 According to Vant Hoffrsquos law osmotic pressure of the diluted

nonelectrolyte solution equal to the pressure

A of a solution in gaseous state and the volume of the solution

Q of a solvent in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

C of the solute in gas phase and the volume of the solution at a given

temperature

26 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for nonelectrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

71

27 The mathematical expression of Vant Hoffrsquos law for electrolytes is

А TRCiπ М sdotsdotsdot=

В TRCπ М sdotsdot=

С TRCnπ М sdotsdotsdot=

28 Isotonic coefficient indicates

A As far the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than the osmotic

pressure of nonelectrolyte

Q How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is more than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

C How many times the osmotic pressure of the electrolyte is less than

nonelectrolyte osmotic pressure at the same molar concentration

29 Hypotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

30 Hypertonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

31 Isotonic solution is the solution which osmotic pressure is

A Higher than the osmotic pressure of another solution

B Lower than the osmotic pressure of another solution

C Equal to the osmotic pressure of another solution

32 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

72

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

33 Physiological or izotonic solution is

А 09 solution of Na2SO4

В 09 solution of NaCl

С 09 solution of NaNO3

34 In medicine it is used hypertonic NaCl solution

А 1

В 10

С 09

35 The isoosmotic state of human body is supported by

A Kidneys and lungs

B Bones and skin

C Brain and liver

36 Hemolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

B Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

37 Plasmolysis is

A The destruction of cells in hypotonic solution

V Wrinkling of cells in a hypertonic solution

C Constant state of the cell

D Increasing of cell volume

38 Oncotic pressure of the blood is

А 1atm

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

73

В04 atm

С 004 atm

D 02 atm

39 Oncotic pressure is due to

A Proteins

B Electrolytes

C Nonelectrolyte

40 25 solution of MgSO4 causes laxative effect because that is

A Hypertonic solution

B Hypotonic solutions

C Isotonic solution

41 Saturated vapor pressure above the solution compared to the vapor

pressure of the solvent is

A Higher

B Lower

C The same

42 The relative decrease of vapor pressure of the solvent over a solution is

A Proportional to mole fraction of a solute

B Proportional to mole fraction of a solvent

C Inversely proportional to mole fraction of a solute

43 Aqueous solutions freeze at temperature

А 0 ordmС

В Higher 0 ordmС

С Lower 0 ordmС

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

74

44 Depression of the solution freezing point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

45 Elevation of the solution boiling point depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Volume of the solution

46 Cryoscopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

47 Ebullioskopic constant depends on

A The concentration of dissolved substances

B Nature of the solute

C Nature of the solvent

D Temperature

48 Elevation of the solution boiling point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

75

49 Depression of the solution freezing point is described by the relationship

А ∆Тf= kfС

В ∆Тb = kbС

С ∆Тf = kf С

D ∆Тb = kb С

50 Isotonic coefficient value depends on

A The electrolyte dissociation degree

B The number of ions that electrolyte are dissociated into

C The nature of the solvent

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

6 LABORATORY WORK

61 Determination of the molecular weight of the solute

by the cryoscopic method

Fill the external glass of cryostat with freezing salt (a mixture of crushed ice

and 20-40 g of sodium chloride)

Pour 25 ml of water into the internal glass of cryostat Put the internal glass

into freezing salt and immerse an electronic thermometer in it

Monitor the thermometer mixing the solution to avoid overcooling of it Note

the crystal haze of solvent temperature (tcr0) Repeat the experiment three times

and write down the average crystallization temperature of the solvent

Weigh 05 g of glucose

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

76

Take the internal glass with crystal solvent out of the freezing salt and melt

the crystals of the solvent heating the glass with your hand

Put glucose into the solvent stir until fully dissolved Determine of

crystallization temperature of solution (tcr) Repeat the experiment three times and

write down the average crystallization temperature of solution

Calculate freezing point depression of the solution in comparison with a pure

solvent

Δtкр= tкр ndash tкр0 =

Calculate the molecular mass of the substance according to the formula

f(solv)

(sub)f(sub) ΔТm

1000mkМ

sdot

sdotsdot=

kf ndash cryoscopic constant of water 186deg

Compare the experimentally found value of molecular mass of glucose with

the tabular value

62 Preparation of inorganic semi-permeable membrane

Pour 2 ml of СuSO4 solution into the test tube add crystalsof К4[Fе(СN)6] (do

not stir) Describe theexternal effect after 20 minutesWrite down the equationof

the reactionIndicate whichcompound isa semipermeable membrane

63 Arborescent formations

Pour3 ml of К2SiОз solution into the test tubeand addcrystals of МnС12

СoSО4 NiСl2(do not stir) Write down theequations of the reactions Specify

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

77 whichcompounds aresemi-permeablemembranes describe the external effect draw

conclusions

7TRAINING AND CONTROL MEANS

ndash cards to identify initial knowledge and skills

ndash control questions

ndash tests

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

78

Tutorial 10

1 THEMESeminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids Acid-baseequilibriuainbiologicalfluidsraquo

2 PURPOSETo summarize the material check the students knowledge

on the topic and the ability to apply this knowledge in biomedical research

3 OBJECTIVES

31 Implementing of the final control of knowledge and skills written card

control a personal interview with each student on written work and computer

testing

32 To pay attention to theissues and tasksthat causedifficulties forstudents

33 To check laboratory work protocols

4 PLAN AND ORGANIZATIONALSTRUCTURE OF THE TUTORIAL

41 Organizational time helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

42 Goal-setting and motivation of studying of the theme (opening

address of the teacher)helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip5 min

43 determination of knowledge level (written card

control)helliphellip30 min

44 Test control helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip10 min

45 Personal interview with each student and checking of laboratory

work protocolshelliphellip60 min

46 Concluding remarks of the teacher guidance to the next

lessonhelliphelliphellip3 min

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

79

5 REFERENCE FOR SELF -STUDY

51 Revise theoretical material on topics 1-9 and tasks solution

52 Revise the questions on studied sections of medicinal chemistry using the

recommended literature and lectures

Control questions

1Chemistry of biogenic elements

Complexinginbiologicalfluids

1 General characteristics of s- p- d-elements and their compounds according

to their position in the periodic table of Mendeleev Their chemical properties

Electronic configuration of atoms and ions

2 Biologicaland medical significance ofs-p- d-elements and their important

compounds

3 Coordination compounds Modern concept of the coordination compounds

structure and their classification

4 Instability and stability constants of coordination compounds Chelate

compounds

2 Acid ndash baseequilibria

inbiologicalfluids

1 Modern ideas of solutions The role of fluids in vital activity

2 The solubility of gases in liquids The solubility of liquids and solids in

liquids

3 Equilibria in electrolytes solutions Dissociation of strong and weak

electrolytes

4 Dissociation of water Ionic product of water pH of body fluids

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

80

5 Calculation of pH of solutions of strong and weak electrolytes

6 Protolytic acid-base theory The main types of protolytic reactions

7 Hydrolysis of salts The degree and the constant of hydrolysis The role of

hydrolysis in biochemical processes

8 Buffer systems protolytic equilibrium in themBuffer capacity Examples

of the buffer systems phosphate hydrocarbonate Calculation of buffer system pH

9 Buffer systems of the human body protein hemoglobin The mechanism of

action Significance of buffer systems for living organisms

10 Fundamentals of titrimetric methods of analysis

11 Acid-base titration Titrants Acid-base indicators and the principles of

their selection

12 Application of acid-base titration methods in clinical analysis in sanitary

and hygienic studies

13 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Raultrsquos Law and its corollaries

Cryometry (depression) ebulliometry

14 Diffusion and osmosis Osmotic pressure Vant Hoffs Law

15 Plasmolysis and hemolysis

16 Colligative properties of diluted solutions Isotonic coefficient

17 Isotonic hypertonic and hypotonic solutions in medicinal practice

5 The role of osmosis and osmotic pressure in biological systems

53 Study tests

Literature

1Medical Chemistry textbook V A Kalibabchuk [and ol] ed by V A

Kalibabchuk - K Medicine 2010 - 224 p

2 Levitin YeYa General and Inorganic Chemistry textbook for students of

higher schools Ye Ya Levitin I A Vedernikova - Kharkiv Golden Pages

2009 - 360 p

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

81

3 Quantitative Chemistry Analysis textbook D C Harris ndash 7th ed WH

Freeman and Company 2007 ndash 808 p

4 Inorganic Chemistry textbook ed D F Shriver P W Atkins - 3th ed -

[s l] Oxford University Press 2004 - 763 p

2 Applied Colloid and Surface Chemistry Textbook R Pashley M

Karaman ndash 2nd ed John Wiley and Sons 2004 ndash 190 p

5 Petrucci RH Harwood WS Herring FG General Chemistry Principles

and Modern Applications ndash 8th ed ndash Prentice Hall 2002 ndash 1160 p

6 Basic Concepts of Analytical Chemistry textbook SM Khopkar ndash 2nd

ed New Age International 1998 ndash 500 p

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine

82

CONTENT

Preface helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip3

Topic Module 2 Acidndashbase equilibria in biological fluids

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip4

Tutorial 4Characteristics of the quantitative composition of solutions Solution

preparationhelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 5

Tutorial 5 Acidndashbase equilibrium in a body Hydrogen ion exponent (pH) of

biological fluidshelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip15

Tutorial 6 Buffer systems helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip31

Tutorial 7 Fundamentals of titrimetric analysis Acid-base titration

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip44

Tutorial 8 Acid-base titration Acidimetry alkalimetry

helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip58

Tutorial 9 Colligative properties of solutions helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip62

Tutorial 10 Seminar laquoChemistry of biogenic elements Complexing in

biological fluids Acidndashbase equilibria in biological

fluidsraquohelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 78

  • MINISTRY OF HEALTH OF UKRAINE
  • MEDICAL CHEMISTRY
  • Manual
  • for teachers and students
  • of the 1-st course of the Medical Faculty
  • specialityGeneralMedicine